Yamaha HTR-4065 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-4065

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

HTR-5065

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

English

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

FEATURES 5

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

PREPARATIONS 11

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 30

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

PLAYBACK 34

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

En 3

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

CONFIGURATIONS 66

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 80

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

APPENDIX 86

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Accessories En 4

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of

purchase.

 YPAO microphone  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the HTR-5065 (U.S.A.

model), unless otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within 6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

AV receiver (the unit)

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

The unit’s

remote control

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.96

Change the input source

and favorite settings with

one touch (SCENE)

. p.35

Operating external

devices with the supplied

remote control

. p.82

* HTR-5065 only

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.46

•USB

. p.50

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.53

• Internet radio

. p.56

•AirPlay

. p.58

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*)

speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite

acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.30

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert

halls (CINEMA DSP)

. p.37

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.41

• Playing back music in multiple rooms

(Zone B)*

. p.60

3D and 4K signals supported

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.23)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18)

When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input

from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.37)

The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you

to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room

(CINEMA DSP 3D).

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.40)

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit

plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,

which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen

You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view

information, or easily configure the settings using the

on-screen menu.

❑ Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption and helps to create an

eco-friendly home theater system (p.76).

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

Set-top box

CD player

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Useful tips

The combination of video/audio input jacks does not

match an external device...

Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the

combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches

the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.74).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.72).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, French, German, Spanish,

Russian and Chinese (p.29).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “Network Update” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu or

“UPDATE” (p.81) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to

update the unit’s firmware.

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Scene settings (p.35)

• Sound/video settings and signal information for each

source (p.62)

• Various function settings (p.67)

• System settings (p.80)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7

Front panel

1 z (power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.72)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.72)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.78)

• An iPod is being charged (p.46)

3 YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.30).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.4).

5 INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).

6 MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.43).

7 PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.44).

8 FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.42).

9 TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.42).

0 Front display

Displays information (p.8).

A DIRECT key

Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.40).

B PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

C INPUT keys

Select an input source.

D TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.63).

E SCENE keys

Select the registered input source and sound program with

one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode

(p.35).

F PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.36).

G STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.39).

H VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game

consoles (p.26).

I USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.50) or an iPod

(p.46).

J VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TUNING

CONTROL

DVD

NET

RADIO

INPUT

SCENE

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

STRAIGHT

VIDEO

DIRECT

iPod/iPhone/iPad

5V 2.1A

AUDIO

VIDEO

VOLUME

AUX USB

TONE

PROGRAM

4:A2 3561 789

JDFG IHCE

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT

Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.

2 CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.37) is working.

CINEMA DSP n

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) is working.

3 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) is

working.

4 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.63) is working.

5 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

6 ZONE indicators (HTR-5065 only)

“SP A” lights up when the Zone A speaker output is enabled

and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B speaker output is

enabled (p.61).

7 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

8 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

9 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

0 Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

A Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.34).

B Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

L Subwoofer

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)*

J Surround back speaker (R)*

K Surround back speaker*

* HTR-5065 only

SL SR

VOL.

MUTE

ENHANCER

ADAPTIVE DRC

STEREO

TUNED

SLEEP

SP A

SP B

SBL SB SBR

OUT

1 623 4 7 8 95

: >A B

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9

Rear panel

1 HDMI OUT jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.

2 HDMI 1–4 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.23).

3 ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26).

4 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.27).

5 Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.28).

6 AV 1–6 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.23).

7 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.28).

8 AUDIO jacks

For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting

audio signals (p.25).

9 SUBWOOFER jack

For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15).

0 MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks:

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.22).

VIDEO jack:

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and

outputting video signals (p.22).

A SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.15).

• The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on

HTR-5065 only.

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDI O

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

NETWORK

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

8 9A:7

4 53

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(HTR-5065 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE/RECEIVER key

Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is

operated with the remote control (p.83). You can operate the

unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device

when this key lights up in green.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks

AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks

AUDIO AUDIO jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

4 Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.42).

FM Switches to FM radio.

AM Switches to AM radio.

MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

5 INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).

6 Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.36).

7 SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

8 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source and sound program with

one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode

(p.35).

9 SETUP key

Displays the setup menu (p.66).

0 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A MODE key

Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio

reception (p.42).

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.48).

B External device operation keys

Let you play back and select menus and perform other

operations for external devices (p.83).

C Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

D TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.82).

E CODE SET button

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p.82).

F ZONE keys (HTR-5065 only)

Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.61).

★/★★ keys (HTR-4065 only)

Change the external device to be controlled without

switching the input source (p.83).

G OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.62).

H VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

I MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.82).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

DVD

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

1234

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

(HTR-5065)

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Placing speakers (p.12)

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.

2 Connecting speakers (p.15)

Connect the speakers to the unit.

3 Connecting a TV (p.18)

Connect a TV to the unit.

4 Connecting playback devices (p.23)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

6 Connecting to a network (p.27)

Connect the unit to a network.

7 Connecting recording devices (p.28)

Connect recording devices to the unit.

8 Connecting the power cable (p.28)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.29)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.30)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 12

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the

representative speaker layout examples.

* HTR-5065 only

• HTR-5065 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and HTR-4065 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.

1 Placing speakers

Caution

• (U.S.A. model only)

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14).

• (Except for U.S.A. model)

Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Speaker system (the number of channels)

7.1* 6.1* 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1

Front (L) 1

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

●●●●●●

Front (R) 2 ●●●●●●

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●● ●

Surround (L) 4

Produce surround right/left channel sounds.

●●●●

Surround (R) 5 ●●●●

Surround back (L)* 6

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

●

Surround back (R)* 7 ●

Surround back* 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”.

●●●●●●

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13

7.1-channel system (HTR-5065 only)

6.1-channel system (HTR-5065 only)

5.1-channel system

4.1-channel system

30 cm (1 ft) or more

10° to 30°10° to 30°

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14

3.1-channel system

2.1-channel system

■ Setting the speaker impedance

(U.S.A. model only)

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

z (power)

STRAIGHT

SPIMP.8MIN

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1-

and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other

systems, connect speakers while referring to the

connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system.

Cables required for connection

(commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)

5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system

(HTR-5065 only)

2 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn

off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch

one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.

Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker

cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front

display when the unit is turned on.

–

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

The unit (rear)

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

The unit (rear)

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the

SINGLE jack (L side).

1 2

Speaker connections

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16

■ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting

the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and

the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to

the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from

the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of

the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side

(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A. and China models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

■ Connecting the subwoofer

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

Connecting front speakers that

support bi-amp connections

(HTR-5065 only)

When using front speakers that support bi-amp

connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks.

To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”

(p.69) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting

the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Connecting Zone B speakers

(HTR-5065 only)

The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input

source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A)

and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B

speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms

(HTR-5065 only)” (p.60).

FRONT

+ (red)

- (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AV6

Audio pin cable

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

SPEAKERS

The unit (rear)

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or

cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the

instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not

making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or

cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp

connections.

1 2

Speaker connections

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 17

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is

required.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output)

features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

(Stereo L/R jacks)

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable.

(Stereo mini jack)

Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo

mini-plug cable.

Input/output jacks and cables

HDMI cable

Component video cable

Video pin cable

AV 4

OPTICAL

(

)

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

Stereo mini-plug cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 18

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

3 Connecting a TV

When connecting a video device with an analog video output

• If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also

need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.22).

• If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the

unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.22).

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection Method 3 (p.21)

■ Connection Method 2 (p.20)

■ Connection Method 1 (p.18)

■ Connection Method 4 (p.22)

Yes

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.96).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTEN

ARC

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

ARC

HDMI OUT jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

The unit (rear)

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

c Press SETUP.

d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.

e Press ENTER again.

f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to

select “On” as shown below.

g Press SETUP.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital

optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20).

• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,

use “TV Audio Input” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the

SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

RETURN

VOLUME

ENTER

TOP

POP UP

DISPLAY

OPTION

SETUP

RETURN

UME

POP UP

DISP

PTI

SETUP

Cursor keys

ENTER

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

HDMI Control

Audio Output

Standby Through

TV Audio Input

Standby Sync

ARC

SCENE

Auto

AV4

Auto

Back: RETURN

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press SETUP.

c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.

d Press ENTER again.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to

select “On” as shown below.

f Press SETUP.

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

HDMI

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

HDMI

OUT

ARC

The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

HDMI input

RETURN

VOLUME

ENTER

TOP

POP UP

DISPLAY

OPTION

SETUP

RETURN

UME

POP UP

DISP

PTI

SETUP

Cursor keys

ENTER

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

HDMI Control

Audio Output

Standby Through

TV Audio Input

Standby Sync

ARC

SCENE

Auto

AV4

Auto

Back: RETURN

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or

if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”

(p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.35),

you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,

the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the

SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

HDMI

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

HDMI

OUT

ARC

The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

HDMI input

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the

unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio

will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the

SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

VIDEO

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack

Video input

(composite video)

Audio output

(digital optical)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

– Connecting an iPod (p.46)

– Connecting a USB storage device (p.50)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change

its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24).

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on

the video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the

unit (p.18 to 21).

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on

the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the

MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22).

4 Connecting playback devices

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

HDMI

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI 1–4 jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI

OUT

ARC

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL COAXIAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 1

AV 2

The unit (rear)

AV 1–2

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(digital optical or digital coaxial)

AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or

AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).

■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your

video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You

can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

❑ Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(either digital optical,

digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,

AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio Video Audio

HDMI

Digital optical HDMI 1–4

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo HDMI 1–4

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO

Component video Analog stereo

AV 1–2

(COMPONENT

VIDEO)

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks

Video device

Audio output

(analog stereo)

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.

Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input

source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (

) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be

used).

Press OPTION.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back

on the video device will be output from the unit.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on

the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on

the audio device will be output from the unit.

RETURN

VOLUME

ENTER

TOP

POP UP

DISPLAY

OPTION

SETUP

NET

RADIO

RETURN

LUME

POP UP

DISPL

SETUP

NET

RADI

HDMI

1 2

1 2 3 4

AUDIO

HDMI

AUDIO

ENTER

OPTION

AV 2

Cursor keys

VOL.

AudioIn

VOL.

AudioAV5

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital optical

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

Audio output

(either digital optical,

digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

AV 1–6 jacks

AUDIO jacks

The unit (rear)

Audio device

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 26

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as

camcorders and portable audio players to the unit.

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).

• You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device.

• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.46) or

“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.50).

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output

from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

CONTROL

DVD

NET

RADIO

INPUT

SCENE

STRAIGHT

VIDEO

iPod/iPhone/iPad

5V 2.1A

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX USB

TONE

PROGRAM

Portable audio player

Camcorder

The unit (front)

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND B

/ZONE

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

NETWORK

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

FM/AM antenna connections

6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 27

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.77).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

6 Connecting to a network

FRONT

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

NETWORK

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Network connections

7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 28

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.

• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks or VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit.

• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks, AUDIO jacks, or VIDEO

AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

7 Connecting recording devices

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video recording

device

8 Connecting the power cable

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

ETWORK

SPEAKERS

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Recording device connections

Power cable connection

9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 29

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

English

Français

Deutsch

Español

Русский

中文

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

English

Français

Deutsch

Español

Русский

中文

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Language setting

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

RETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

SETUP

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 30

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

• (HTR-5065 only)

If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp

Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting

YPAO.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

The following screen appears on the TV.

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO microphone

Listening

position

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

The unit (front)

Auto Setup

Start

Exit

Press SETUP key

to Start

“Power Amp Assign”

setting (p.69)

(HTR-5065 only)

Power Amp Assign

Basic

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 31

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the

cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 3 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Start” and press SETUP.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to

start the measurement immediately.

• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the

procedure in “Error messages” (p.32).

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

1 The number of speakers (front side/rear

side/subwoofer)

2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)

3 Adjustment range of speaker output level

4 Warning message (if available)

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.32) or “Warning messages” (p.33).

• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in

the front display.

• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use

the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Auto Setup

Start

Exit

Measurement

Finished

Result

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

3.0 / 10.5 m

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

Auto Setup

Start

Exit

Measurement

Finished

Result

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

3.0 / 10.5 m

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

SAVE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

SETUP

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

TV screen

Front display

■ Procedure to handle errors

Check the content of error message and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the

desired operation.

To exit the YPAO measurement:

a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press

ENTER.

c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

To retry the YPAO measurement from

beginning:

Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.

To proceed with the current YPAO

measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):

Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.

Error

message

Auto Setup

Start

Exit

ERROR

E-5:Noisy

PROCEED

VOL.

E-5:NOISY

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:No Front SP

(E-1:NO FRNT SP)

Front speakers are not detected.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker

connections.

E-2:No Sur. SP

(E-2:NO SUR SP)

One of the surround speakers cannot be

detected.

E-4:SBR → SBL

(E-4:SBR → SBL)

A surround back speaker is connected to

the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to

connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the

unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5:Noisy

(E-5:NOISY)

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and

ignores any noise detected.

E-6:Check Sur.

(E-6:CHECK SUR)

Surround back speakers are connected,

but no surround speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use

surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and

then reconnect the speakers.

E-7:No MIC

(E-7:NO MIC)

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly

and retry YPAO.

E-8:No Signal

(E-8:NO SIGNAL)

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test

tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly

and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the

nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-9:User Cancel

(E-9:CANCEL)

The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.

E-10:Internal Err.

(E-10:INTERNAL)

An internal error has occurred.

Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs

repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 33

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

TV screen

Front display

■ Procedure to handle warnings

Check the content of warning message

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the

desired operation.

To save the measurement results:

Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

To discard the measurement result:

Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the

unit.

Warning

message

Auto Setup

Start

Exit

Measurement

Finished

Result

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

3.0 / 10.5 m

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

W-1:Out of Phase

VOL.

W-1:PHASE

Problem speaker (blinks)

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:Out of Phase

(W-1:PHASE)

A speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If

the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the

unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this

message may appear even if the speakers are connected

correctly.

W-2:Over Distance

(W-2:DISTANCE)

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)

from the listening position.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker

within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3:Level Error

(W-3:LEVEL)

There are significant volume differences

between the speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of

each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is

any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect

speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We

recommend using the same speakers or speakers with

specifications that are as similar as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 34

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)

• Playing back iPod music (p.46)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.50)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.53)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.56)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.58)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE

CONTROL on the front panel (p.63).

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Basic playback procedure

Input source group Item

HDMI 1–4

AV 1–6

AUDIO

V-AUX

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name)

* During simple playback of iPod:

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name)

TUNER

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

* (Europe model only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.45).

VOL.

SL SR

AudioDecoder

Item name

VOL.

SL SR

ProLogic

Information

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

NHANCE

IREC

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

LEE

INFO

VOLUME

MUTE

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 35

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,

sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target

zones (HTR-5065 only) with just one touch.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

* HTR-5065: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4065: 5ch Stereo

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or

start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction

with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.73) in the

“Setup” menu to “On”.

Configuring scene assignments

Perform the following operations to prepare the

settings you want to assign to a scene.

• Select an input source (p.34)

• Select a sound program (p.36)

• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)

• (HTR-5065 only)

Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.61)

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER

blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.83) to register it.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE Input

Sound

program

Compressed

Music

Enhancer

Target zone

(HTR-5065

only)

SCENE

link

playback

BD/DVD HDMI 1

MOVIE

(Sci-Fi)

Off

Zone A:

enabled

Zone B:

disabled

TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On

Zone A:

enabled

Zone B:

disabled

NET

RADIO

MUSIC

(7ch/5ch

Stereo*)

Zone A:

enabled

Zone B:

disabled

Off

RADIO TUNER

MUSIC

(7ch/5ch

Stereo*)

Zone A:

enabled

Zone B:

disabled

Off

SL SR

SETComplete

VOL.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

LEE

SCENE

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 36

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.37)

Press MOVIE repeatedly.

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo

playback (p.38)

Press MUSIC repeatedly.

Selecting a surround decoder (p.40)

Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

Switching to the straight decode mode (p.39)

Press STRAIGHT.

Switching to the direct playback mode (p.40)

Press DIRECT.

Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)

Press ENHANCER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM on the front panel.

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or

playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.39) is automatically

selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8).

Selecting the sound mode

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

HDMI

RESET

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 37

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie

theaters or concert halls in your room.

• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.63) in the “Option” menu.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

SL SR

Sci-Fi

VOL.

Sound program category

Sound program

“CINEMA DSP” lights up

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

5ch Stereo

(HTR-5065: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4065: 5ch Stereo)

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39

■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your

room.

CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions

are met.

• One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch

Stereo) is selected (p.37).

• “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“On”.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

7ch/5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the

unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the

front-side speakers.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• (HTR-5065 only)

To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.63) in the “Option” menu to a

setting other than “Off”.

SL SR

Hall in Vienna

VOL.

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

SL SR

STRAIGHT

VOL.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

STRAIGHT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 40

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.93).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

* HTR-5065 only

(HTR-5065 only)

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.

• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.73)

in the “Setup” menu.

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound

(direct playback)

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not

available.

– Selecting sound programs

– Adjusting the tone control

– Operating the on-screen menu

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLII Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLIIx Movie*

bPLII Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music.

bPLIIx Music*

bPLII Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games.

bPLIIx Game*

Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.

SL SR

ProLogic

VOL.

SL SR

DIRECT

VOL.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

SUR.DECODE

DIRECT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 41

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz

– High-definition streaming audio

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.64) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

SL SR

ENHANCER

Enhancer On

VOL.

“ENHANCER” lights up

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENHANCER

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 42

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in a Europe model.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press FM or AM to select a band.

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM

radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by

selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.65) in the “Option” menu.

Listening to FM/AM radio

SL SR

VOL.

SBL SBR

FM87.50MHz

VOL.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

FM98.50MHz

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TRAI

INP

MUTE

NET

RADI

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

TUNER

MODE

TUNING

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 43

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

■ Registering radio stations automatically

(Auto Preset)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to

40 stations).

• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.

• (Europe model only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the

Auto Preset function.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again

to start the registration immediately.

• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press

PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds

after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just

wait for 5 seconds).

• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the

“Option” menu closes automatically.

■ Registering a radio station manually

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.42)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and

then press MEMORY again.

VOL.

AutoPreset

VOL.

01:FM87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

VOL.

AutoPreset

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

VOL.

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset number

SL SR

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

02:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

MEMORY

PRESET

OPTION

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 44

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

■ Clearing preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station

to be cleared and press ENTER.

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then

the next in-use preset number is displayed.

Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are

cleared.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

01:FM98.50MHz

PRESET

VOL.

ClearPreset

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

VOL.

01:Cleared

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

RETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

TUNER

PRESET

OPTION

Cursor keys

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 45

Radio Data System tuning

(Europe model only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■ Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.43).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

Frequency Frequency

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

ProgramType

INFO

Item name

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

CLASSICS

9850

Information

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

TPFM101.30MHz

FINISH

Traffic information station (frequency)

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

INFO

OPTION

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 46

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software

version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect

your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22). To select a video, operate the

iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.

If “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

change until full.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

Supported iPods (as of December 2011)

• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)

• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

• iPad2, iPad

RADIO

STRAIGHT

VIDEO

iPod/iPhone/iPad

5V 2.1A

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX USB

The unit (front)

VOL.

SL SR

Connected

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 47

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly

operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press

DISPLAY.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.48).

■ Browse screen

1 List name

2 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

3 Item number/total

4 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

iPod

Music

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

1/6

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

iPod

Now Playing

5:10

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

iPod

Music

[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

1/6

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

USB

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 48

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song

length.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

External device

operation keys

Function

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding down).

iPod

Now Playing

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

5:10

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (while holding

down).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

MODE

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 49

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order. “x”

appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order. “x”

appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”

appears in the TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

MODE

OPTION

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 50

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files.

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

RADIO

STRAIGHT

VIDEO

iPod/iPhone/iPad

5V 2.1A

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUX USB

USB

The unit (front)

USB storage device

VOL.

SL SR

Connected

USB

1/12

Blues

Classical

Electronica

Jazz

Pop

Rock

Soundtrack

Speaking

USB

Top

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 51

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press

DISPLAY.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

■ Browse screen

1 List name

2 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

3 Item number/total

4 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

USB

Now Playing

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

1/12

Blues

Classical

Electronica

Jazz

Pop

Rock

Soundtrack

Speaking

USB

Top

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 52

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

External device

operation keys

Function

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

USB

Now Playing

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “x” appears on

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the

TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

OPTION

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 53

You can play back music files stored on your PC or

DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files.

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

1/4

DESKTOP

NAS A

NAS B

NOTE

SERVER

Media Server

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

RETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 54

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press

DISPLAY.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

■ Browse screen

1 List name

2 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

3 Item number/total

4 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

SERVER

Now Playing

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

1/14

Blues

Classical

Electronica

Jazz

Pop

Rock

Soundtrack

Speaking

SERVER

NAS A

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 55

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.78).

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

External device

operation keys

Function

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

SERVER

Now Playing

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “x” appears on

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the

TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

OPTION

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 56

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the

TV screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.27). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press

DISPLAY.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by

accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this

feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your

personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in

“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

Listening to Internet radio

1/7

Bookmarks

Locations

Genres

New Stations

Popular Stations

Podcasts

Help

NET RADIO

Top

Station Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

NET RADIO

Now Playing

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 57

■ Browse screen

1 List name

2 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

3 Item number/total

4 Playback indicator

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

1/7

Bookmarks

Locations

Genres

New Stations

Popular Stations

Podcasts

Help

NET RADIO

Top

Station Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

NET RADIO

Now Playing

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

RETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 58

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup”

menu.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

Supported iTunes/iPods (as of December 2011)

• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)

• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later

iTunes

Router

Playback starts

iPod

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 59

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• To adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.65) in

the “Option” menu to “Limited” (default) or “Full”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song

length.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in

advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

External device

operation keys

Function

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Artist Name

Album Name

Song Title

2:30

AirPlay

Now Playing

5:30

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

SOU

EIVER

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) En 60

The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in

the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room

(Zone B).

For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you

are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when

you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when

you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms

simultaneously.

• Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B.

• The same input source and volume setting are applied to both zones.

• You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction

with a scene selection (p.35)

Preparing Zone B

Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.

Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker

cables.

To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B

speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to

“ZoneB” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only)

Living room (Zone A)

Study room (Zone B)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

The unit (rear)

Zone A

Zone B

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) En 61

■ Basic playback procedure

Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio

output to Zone A or Zone B.

“SP A” lights up in the front display when the Zone A output

is enabled and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B output is

enabled.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

■ Adjusting the volume for Zone B

If you are bothered by volume differences between Zone A/B,

follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim”

(Volume Trim) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim”

(ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the

setting.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

VOL.

SL SR

SP A

SP B

HDMI1

“SP A” and/or “SP B” light up

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

NHANCE

IREC

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

LEE

ENTER

RETURN

VOLUME

OPTION

ZONE A

ZONE B

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 62

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

VOL.

SL SR

ToneControl

OPTION

Tone Control

DSP/Surround

Volume Trim

Lipsync

Signal Info

Audio In

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

DSP/Surround

(DSP/Surround)

DSP Level

(DSP Level)

Adjusts the sound field effect level. 63

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

Extended

Surround

(EXTD)

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources

when surround back speakers are used.

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 64

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 64

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 64

ZoneB Trim

(ZB.Trim)

(HTR-5065 only)

Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B.

Lipsync (Lipsync)

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”

menu.

Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 64

Audio In (Audio In)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source

with an audio jack of others.

Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 65

Auto Preset (Auto Preset)

Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong

signals as presets.

Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 44

Traffic Program (TrafficProgram)

(Europe model only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 63

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)

Configures the sound field program and surround settings.

❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

Setting range

-6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)

Default

0 dB

❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

❑ Extended Surround (EXTD)

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

Repeat (Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.49),

USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55).

—

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.49),

USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55).

—

Volume Interlock (Interlock)

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod

via AirPlay.

Item Function Page

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

Auto (Auto)

(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the

signal in 5.1-channel.)

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 64

• Some Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. In

this case, the unit reproduces the signals in 5.1-channel if “Extended Surround” is set to “Auto”. To

reproduce the signals in 6.1 or 7.1-channel, set it to “bPLIIx Movie”, “bPLIIx Music”, or “EX/ES”.

❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.41).

Settings

Default

USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, TUNER: On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Lipsync (Lipsync)

Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Setup” menu.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

■ Signal Info (Signal Info)

Displays information about the video/audio signal.

Choices

• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

On (On) (default) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal

Channel (CHAN)

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,

and LFE.

Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal

Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 65

■ Audio In (Audio In)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an

audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio

output

• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo

jacks (such as game consoles)

Input sources

HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2

■ Setup procedure

(To input audio through a digital optical jack)

Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks

with a digital optical cable.

(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)

Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks

with a digital coaxial cable.

(To input audio through analog audio jacks)

Select “AV 5”, “AV 6”, or “AUDIO”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding

audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.

■ Video Out (Video Out)

Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.

Settings

■ Volume Interlock (Interlock)

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Settings

Off (Off) (default) Does not output video.

HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6,

V-AUX

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (Ltd)

(default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80

dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full (Full)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 66

CONFIGURATIONS

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry

out operations while viewing the front display.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

Distance

Level

Equalizer

Test Tone

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

Distance

Level

Equalizer

Test Tone

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 67

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Configuration

Power Amp Assign

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects a speaker system.

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 69

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 69

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 69

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 70

Surround Back

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 70

Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 70

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 70

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 71

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 71

Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 71

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 71

HDMI Configuration

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 72

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 72

Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 72

TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 72

Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 73

ARC Enables/disables ARC. 73

SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 73

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 68

Sound

DSP Parameter

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 73

Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 73

Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 74

Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 74

Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 74

Lipsync

Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 74

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 74

Vol ume

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 75

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 75

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 75

ECO

Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 75

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 76

Function

Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 76

Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 77

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 77

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 77

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 78

DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 78

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 78

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 78

Information Displays the network information on the unit. 79

Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 79

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 79

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 69

Speaker

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

❑ Power Amp Assign

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects a speaker system.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations

are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection.

Settings

❑ Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.

Settings

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Basic (default)

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using

Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection).

BI-AMP

Select this option when you connect front speakers that support

bi-amp connections (p.16).

ZoneB

Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.60) in addition to

the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

Distance

Level

Equalizer

Test Tone

Use (default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.

The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel

audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 70

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

❑ Surround Back

(HTR-5065 only)

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”, or

when “Surround” is set to “None”.

❑ Crossover

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker

whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be

produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

❑ Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the

subwoofer phase.

Settings

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce

surround back channel audio.

Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.

Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 71

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5065 only),

Surround Back R (HTR-5065 only), Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)

Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5065 only),

Surround Back R (HTR-5065 only), Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB

Others: -1.0 dB

■ Equalizer

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

❑ EQ Select

Selects the type of equalizer to be used.

Settings

• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.30).

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select

the desired speaker channel.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor

keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

PEQ

Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO

measurement (p.30).

GEQ (default)

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

Off Does not use the equalizer.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Equalizer

EQ Select

GEQ Edit

Channel

63Hz

160Hz

400Hz

1kHz

2.5kHz

6.3kHz

16kHz

GEQ

Front L

Back:RETURN

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 72

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ Configuration

❑ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.96).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.

Settings

HDMI OUT (TV)

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Settings

❑ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the

standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AV 1–6, AUDIO

Default

AV 4

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,

and “SCENE”.

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Configuration

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes approximately 1 W of power.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 73

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

❑ SCENE

Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected

to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.

• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device

• Playback device: starting playback

Choices (SCENE keys)

BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO

Settings

Default

BD/DVD, TV: On

NET, RADIO: Off

• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend

using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ DSP Parameter

Configures the surround decoder settings.

❑ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch

Stereo).

Settings

❑ Panorama

Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is

enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a

spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is

effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is selected.

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

On (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.

On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

DSP Parameter

Lipsync

Volume

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 74

❑ Center Width

Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective

when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is selected.

Setting range

0 to 7

Default

❑ Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to

strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This

setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is

selected.

Setting range

-3 to +3

Default

❑ Center Image

Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher

to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken

(more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.

Setting range

0.0 to 1.0

Default

0.3

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.64) in the “Option” menu.

❑ Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.

❑ Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to

“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 75

■ Volume

Configures the volume settings.

❑ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

❑ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Down

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

Default

Europe model: 8 hours

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Min/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.

-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

(0.5 dB increments)

Sets the level to the specified volume level.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Auto Power Down

ECO Mode

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 76

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the

unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.

Input sources

HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6, AUDIO, USB, V-AUX

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press

ENTER.

• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the

cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a character.

To confirm the new name, press ENTER.

• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Input Rename

Dimmer

Memory Guard

Input Rename

Blu-ray

HDMI1

OK:ENTER

CANCEL:RETURN

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 77

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ Dimmer

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.76) is set to “On”.

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Memory Guard

Memory Guard On

Back:RETURN

Icon

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

IP Address

MAC Address Filter

DMC Control

Network Standby

Network Name

Information

Network Update

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

❑ Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a character.

To confirm the new name, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes approximately 2 W of power.)

Network Name

YAMAHA xxxxxx

Back:RETURN

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79

■ Information

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ Network Update

Updates the firmware via the network.

❑ Perform Update

Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s

firmware” (p.85).

❑ Firmware Version

Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.

❑ System ID

Displays the system ID number.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

MAC Address MAC address

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)

English (default) English

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Chinese

Setup

Speaker

HDMI

Sound

ECO

Function

Network

Language

English

Français

Deutsch

Español

Русский

中文

Français

Deutsch

Español

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 80

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

z (power).

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

(U.S.A. model only)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object, such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.

• The registered remote control codes (p.82) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Item Function Page

SP IMP.

(U.S.A. model only)

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 80

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 81

INIT Restores the default settings. 81

UPDATE Updates the firmware. 81

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 81

z (power)

STRAIGHTPROGRAM

6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

SPIMP.8MIN

REMOTEIDID1

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 81

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it

is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images

on the TV screen do not appear correctly.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A. model: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is

connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,

refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the “Network

Update” screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.85).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

TVFORMATNTSC

INITCANCEL

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

UPDATEUSB

VERSIONxx.xx

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 82

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register

the codes again.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.83). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

TV z

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 83

Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• (HTR-4065 only)

If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★ or ★★)

key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input

source after pressing the star key.

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press the input selection key.

For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code

for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.35).

■ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in

orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP

Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.82).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

RESET

VIE

MUSI

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

MOD

NET

RADI

LEE

DISPLAY

SOURCE z

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

External device

operation keys

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 84

Resetting remote control codes

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input

selection key.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press the input selection key.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

To reset the remote control to factory default settings

a Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.

b Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

ETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

RESET

VIE

MUSI

ENTER

MEN

POP-U

MEN

PTI

ETUP

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

LEE

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

Numeric keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware En 85

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and

press ENTER.

If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears

in the “Network Update” screen.

• To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and

press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update

starts.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press z (power) on the

front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

Updating the unit’s firmware

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via

HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).

Update:ENTER

Network Update

Perform Update

Firmware Version

System ID

x.xx

xxxxxxxx

Back:RETURN

Icon

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

DIRECT

HDMI

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

RECEIVER

CODE SET

OPTION

SETUP

TUNING

STRAIGHT

SUR. DECODE

INPUT

MUTE

9 0

ENT

56 87

MODE

NET

RADIO

TUNER

1 2

NET

USB

V-AUX

ZONE

1 2 3 4

SLEEP

AUDIO

RETURN

LUME

NHANCE

IREC

HDMI

RESET

VIE

MUSI

MEN

POP-U

MEN

SOU

EIVER

PTI

TUNING

TRAI

INP

MUTE

MOD

NET

RADI

TUNE

NET

V-AU

LEE

AUDI

ENTER

SETUP

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 86

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize

the speaker settings again (p.30). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,

use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.69).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.75).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.75).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the

front display when selecting an input source...

By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the

front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,

use “Input Rename” (p.76) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the

presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.77).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.80).

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 87

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power and system

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator

on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize

and reboot the unit.

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.16).

The unit enters

standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu

to “Off” (p.75).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.80).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.16).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize

and reboot the unit.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 88

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).

(HTR-5065 only)

Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.75).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.71).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the

speaker settings (p.69).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker

volume (p.71).

(HTR-5065 only)

Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

(HTR-5065 only)

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.63).

“Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”.

When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”,

you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers,

set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.69).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.70).

Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.30) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.69).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 89

Video

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.72).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.72).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.73). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). If necessary, change

the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.76).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This

may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about

video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal

Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). For information about video signals supported

by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.98).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 90

FM/AM radio

USB and network

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.42).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.42).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.42).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.43).

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.77). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.77).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 91

Remote control

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.53).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key

lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices

(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.82). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 92

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.53).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.27).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Connect error The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.46).

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 93

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 94

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 95

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 96

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.35)

• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.83)

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO in

COMPONENT VIDEO

out

VIDEO out

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 97

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.72) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby

Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 98

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals)

• 576p/50 Hz • 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals)

APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 99

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP

/ZONE B

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

(

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OUT

AUDIO

AV 4

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

NETWORK

HDMI

OUT

ARC

ANTENNA

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

(HTR-5065 U.S.A. model)

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 100

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

(For HTR-4065)

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

(For HTR-5065)

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory

standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows

Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 101

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO, V-AUX [Mini Jack])

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, V-AUX)

Component x 2 (AV 1–2)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4)

•Other

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

[HTR-5065]

- Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R*)

* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B]

- Subwoofer Out x 1

- AV OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

[HTR-4065]

- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 1

- AV OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,

ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

- 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

-DSD 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[Europe model]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital EX

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

[HTR-5065]

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby

Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby

Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

[HTR-4065]

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby

Pro Logic II Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 102

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[U.S.A. model] (

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8

)

[Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)

Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W

[U.S.A. model] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W

Center ............................................................................... 95 W

Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W

Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]............................. 95 W+95 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[U.S.A. model] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

Front L/R .................................................................... 115 W/ch

Center ....................................................................... 115 W/ch

Surround L/R.............................................................. 115 W/ch

Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]................................. 115 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (

JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6

)

[China model]

Front L/R .................................................................... 135 W/ch

Center ........................................................................ 135 W/ch

Surround L/R.............................................................. 135 W/ch

Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]................................. 135 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A. model]

Front L/R (8/6/4 Ω) ............................................ 110/130/160 W

[Other models]

Front L/R (6/4 Ω) ...................................................... 110/130 W

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. model]

8 Ω .................................................................................. 0.2 dB

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ............................. 120 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/470 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz)..........................+0/-3 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

AV 5 etc.

(Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)

.........................................................................100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB

• Tone Control Characteristics

Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround)................................ 12 dB/oct.

H.P.F. (Surround Back [HTR-5065]).......................... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. model]..................................................................NTSC

[Other models]....................................................................PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response

Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. model]..............................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono ................................................................................71 dB

Stereo...............................................................................69 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono .................................................................................0.3%

Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%

• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. model].................................................530 to 1710 kHz

[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. model]................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Europe model] ............................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 103

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] .................................................... 270 W/320 VA

[Other models]................................................................ 280 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)

...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical)

Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical)

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

...................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”)

•Weight

[HTR-5065] ..................................................... 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs)

[HTR-4065] ..................................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 104

Symbols

★/★★ keys ................................................10

Envelope icon (p) ....................................85

Lock icon (o) ...........................................77

Numerics

2.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................14

2ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38

3.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................14

4.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................13

4K signal (Video resolution) ......................98

5.1-channel system

(Speaker connection) ............................15

5.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................13

5ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38

6.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................13

7.1-channel system

(Speaker connection) ............................15

7.1-channel system

(Speaker placement) ............................13

7ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38

A.DRC (Option menu) ...............................63

Action Game (Sound program) .................37

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) ...................63

Adjustment (Setup menu, Lipsync) ...........74

ADVANCED SETUP ..................................80

AirPlay .......................................................58

AM antenna ...............................................26

ARC .......................................................... 18

ARC (Setup menu, HDMI) ........................ 73

ARC-compatible TV (Connection) ............ 18

Audio Decoder (Front display) ................. 34

Audio device connection ......................... 25

Audio In (Option menu) ...................... 25, 65

AUDIO jack .............................................. 17

Audio Output (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72

Audio Return Channel .............................. 18

Auto Power Down (Setup menu, ECO) .... 75

Auto Preset (FM radio) ............................. 43

Automatic preset (FM radio) .................... 43

AV OUT jack ............................................. 28

B RATE (Signal information) ..................... 64

Banana plug ............................................. 16

Bass (Option menu) ................................. 63

Battery ........................................................ 4

BI-AMP (Setup menu) .............................. 69

Bi-amp speaker connections ................... 16

Bi-amplification connection ...................... 94

Bitrate (Signal information) ....................... 64

CAT-5 (Network cable) ............................. 27

Cellar Club (Sound program) ................... 38

Center (Setup menu, Speaker) ................ 69

Center Image

(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74

Center Width

(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74

Chamber (Sound program) ...................... 38

CHAN (Signal information) ....................... 64

Channel (Signal information) .................... 64

Charge (iPod) ........................................... 46

CINEMA DSP ............................................ 37

CINEMA DSP 3D ...................................... 39

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73

COAXIAL jack .......................................... 17

Combination of video/audio input jacks ... 24

Component video cable ........................... 17

Component video connection

(Playback devices) ............................... 23

COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 17

Composite video connection

(Playback devices) ............................... 24

Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 41

Configuration (Scene function) ................ 35

Configuration (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72

Configuration (Setup menu, Speaker) ...... 69

Connection (Audio devices) ..................... 25

Connection (iPod) .................................... 46

Connection (NAS) .................................... 27

Connection (PC) ....................................... 27

Connection (Recording device) ............... 28

Connection (Speaker cables) .................. 16

Connection (Subwoofer) .......................... 16

Connection (USB storage device) ........... 50

Connection (Video devices) ..................... 23

Controlling external devices ..................... 82

Crossover (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 70

Crossover frequency setting

(Subwoofer) .......................................... 30

Crossover frequency setting (the unit) ..... 70

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 105

Default Gateway

(Setup menu, IP Address) .....................77

DHCP (Setup menu, IP Address) ..............77

Digital coaxial cable ..................................17

Digital Media Controller ............................78

Digital optical cable ..................................17

Dimension

(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ..............74

Dimmer (Setup menu, Function) ...............77

DIRECT (Sound mode) .............................40

Direct playback .........................................40

Distance (Setup menu, Speaker) ..............71

DLNA-compatible NAS .............................53

DMC (Digital Media Controller) .................78

DMC Control (Setup menu, Network) .......78

DNS Server (Setup menu, IP Address) .....77

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ......63

Dolby Pro Logic (Surround decoder) ........40

Dolby Pro Logic II (Surround decoder) .....40

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Surround decoder) ...40

Drama (Sound program) ...........................37

DSP Level (Option menu) .........................63

DSP Parameter (Setup menu, Sound) ......73

DSP Program (Front display) ....................34

DSP/Surround (Option menu) ...................63

DTS Neo: 6 (Surround decoder) ...............40

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ...................63

Dynamic Range (Setup menu, Volume) ....75

ECO (Setup menu) ....................................75

ECO Mode (Setup menu, ECO) ................76

Enhancer (Option menu) ...........................64

ENHANCER (Sound mode) .......................41

EQ Select (Setup menu, Equalizer) ..........71

Equalizer (Setup menu, Speaker) .............71

Error indications on the front display ....... 92

Error message (YPAO) ............................. 32

EX/ES (Extended Surround) ..................... 63

EXTD (Option menu) ................................ 63

Extended Surround (Option menu) .......... 63

External device operation keys ................ 10

Extra Bass (Setup menu, Speaker) .......... 70

Firmware update ...................................... 85

Firmware version ...................................... 81

FM antenna .............................................. 26

FORMAT (Signal information) ................... 64

Format (Signal Information) ...................... 64

Frequency (FM/AM radio) ........................ 42

Front (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 69

Front display (Part name and functions) .... 8

Front display information .......................... 34

Front panel (Part names and functions) ..... 7

Function (Setup menu) ............................. 76

GEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71

Hall in Munich (Sound program) .............. 38

Hall in Vienna (Sound program) ............... 38

HDMI (Setup menu) ................................. 72

HDMI cable .............................................. 17

HDMI connection (Playback devices) ...... 23

HDMI Control ........................................... 96

HDMI Control (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72

HDMI Control-compatible TV

(Connection) ........................................ 20

HDMI jack ................................................ 17

HDMI OUT (TV) (Setup menu, HDMI) ...... 72

Headphones .............................................. 7

High definition audio ................................ 98

High speed HDMI cable .......................... 17

Impedance (Speaker) .............................. 12

In.Trim (Option menu) .............................. 64

Indicators (Part name and functions) ......... 8

INFO key .................................................. 34

Information (Front display) ....................... 34

Information (Setup menu, Network) ......... 79

INIT (ADVANCED SETUP) ........................ 81

Initial Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ....... 75

Input (Front display) ................................. 34

Input (Signal information) ......................... 64

Input Rename (Setup menu, Volume) ...... 76

Input selection keys ................................. 10

Input Trim (Option menu) ......................... 64

Interlock (Option menu) ........................... 65

Internet radio ............................................ 56

IP Address (Setup menu, Network) .......... 77

iPad .......................................................... 46

iPhone ...................................................... 46

iPod .......................................................... 46

iTunes ....................................................... 58

Language ................................................. 29

Language (Setup menu) .......................... 29

Level (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 71

LFE ........................................................... 94

Lipsync (Option menu) ............................. 64

Lipsync (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 74

Low Frequency Effects ............................. 94

MAC Address Filter

(Setup menu, Network) ........................ 78

Manual preset (FM/AM radio) .................. 43

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 106

Manual speaker configuration

(Setup menu) ........................................69

Max Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ..........75

Media Sharing ...........................................53

MEMORY (FM/AM radio) ...........................43

Memory (FM/AM radio) .............................43

Memory Guard (Setup menu, Function) ...77

MODE key .................................................42

Monaural reception mode (FM radio) .......42

Mono Movie (Sound program) ..................37

MOVIE (Sound program category) ...........37

Multiple room playback .............................60

MUSIC (Sound program category) ...........38

Music Video (Sound program) ..................38

MUTE key ..................................................34

Muting .......................................................34

NAS ...........................................................53

Neo: 6 Cinema (Surround decoder) .........40

Neo: 6 Music (Surround decoder) ............40

NET RADIO (Input) ....................................56

Network (Setup menu) ..............................77

Network cable ...........................................27

Network information ..................................79

Network Name (Setup menu, Network) ....78

Network Standby

(Setup menu, Network) .........................78

Network Update

(Setup menu, Network) .........................79

NTSC (Video signal type) ..........................81

OPTICAL jack ............................................17

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically .........................................30

OPTION key ..............................................62

Option menu ............................................ 62

Option menu item list ............................... 62

Output (Signal information) ...................... 64

PAL (Video signal type) ............................ 81

Panorama

(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73

PC ............................................................ 53

PEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71

PHONES jack ............................................. 7

Placement (Speakers) .............................. 12

Playback (iPod) ........................................ 47

Playback (NAS) ........................................ 53

Playback (PC) .......................................... 53

Playback (Server) ..................................... 53

Playback (USB storage device) ............... 50

Playback device operations

(Remote control) .................................. 83

PLII Game (Surround decoder) ................ 40

PLII Movie (Surround decoder) ................ 40

PLII Music (Surround decoder) ................ 40

PLIIx Game (Surround decoder) .............. 40

PLIIx Mo (Extended Surround) ................. 63

PLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ............ 63

PLIIx Movie (Surround decoder) .............. 40

PLIIx Mu (Extended Surround) ................. 63

PLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ............ 63

PLIIx Music (Surround decoder) .............. 40

Power Amp Assign

(Setup menu, Speaker) ........................ 69

Preparation (Zone B) ................................ 60

Preset (FM/AM radio) ............................... 43

Preset station select (FM/AM radio) ......... 44

Preset stations (FM/AM radio) .................. 43

Radio Data System ................................... 45

Rear panel (Part name and functions) ....... 9

Recording device connection .................. 28

Remote control

(Part name and functions) .................... 10

Remote control code for a TV .................. 82

Remote Control Code Search .................. 83

Remote control codes for playback

devices ................................................. 83

Remote control ID .................................... 80

Remote control sensor ............................... 4

Remote control signal transmitter ............ 10

REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP) ........... 80

Restore of the default settings ................. 81

Roleplaying Game (Sound program) ....... 37

Router ....................................................... 27

SAMPL (Signal information) ..................... 64

Sampling (Signal information) .................. 64

SCENE ...................................................... 35

SCENE (Setup menu, HDMI) .................... 73

SCENE function ........................................ 35

Scene function ......................................... 35

Scene function configuration ................... 35

Sci-Fi (Sound program) ............................ 37

Server ....................................................... 53

SERVER (Input) ........................................ 53

Setup menu .............................................. 66

Setup menu item list ................................. 67

Sharing Setup ........................................... 53

Signal Info (Option menu) ........................ 64

SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 41

Simple play (iPod) .................................... 48

SLEEP key ................................................ 10

Sleep timer ............................................... 10

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 107

Sound (Setup menu) .................................73

sound field effect ......................................37

Sound mode ..............................................36

Sound program .........................................37

Sound program category ..........................37

SP A indicator ...........................................61

SP B indicator ...........................................61

SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP) ..................14

Speaker connection ..................................15

Speaker connection (Bi-amp) ...................16

Speaker connection (Zone B) ...................60

Speaker impedance ..................................12

Speaker impedance setting ......................14

Speaker indicators ......................................8

Speaker placement ...................................12

Spectacle (Sound program) .....................37

Sports (Sound program) ...........................37

Standard (Sound program) .......................37

Standby indicator ........................................7

Standby Sync (Setup menu, HDMI) ..........73

Standby Through (Setup menu, HDMI) ....72

Stereo mini jack .........................................17

Stereo mini-plug cable ..............................17

Stereo pin cable ........................................17

STP network cable ....................................27

STRAIGHT (Sound mode) .........................39

Straight decode ........................................39

Subnet Mask (Setup menu, IP Address) ...77

Subwoofer (Setup menu, Speaker) ...........69

Subwoofer connection ..............................16

Subwoofer Phase

(Setup menu, Speaker) .........................70

Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) .................64

SUR.DEC (Sound mode) ...........................40

SUR.DECODE (Sound mode) ...................40

Surround (Setup menu, Speaker) .............70

Surround Back (Setup menu, Speaker) ... 70

Surround decoder .................................... 40

SW.Trim (Option menu) ............................ 64

System ID (Setup menu, Network) ........... 79

Test Tone (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 71

The Bottom Line (Sound program) ........... 38

The Roxy Theatre (Sound program) ......... 38

Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 63

TONE CONTROL key ............................... 63

TP (Traffic Program) ................................. 45

Traffic information .................................... 45

Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 45

Treble (Option menu) ............................... 63

Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 42

TV Audio Input (Setup menu, HDMI) ........ 72

TV connection .......................................... 18

TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP) .......... 81

TV operation keys .................................... 10

TV operations (Remote control) ............... 82

TV with HDMI input jacks (Connection) ... 21

TV without HDMI input jacks

(Connection) ........................................ 22

UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP) ................ 81

Update of the unit’s firmware ................... 85

Updating the firmware .............................. 81

USB (Input) ........................................ 47, 50

USB jack .................................................... 7

USB mass storage class .......................... 50

USB storage device ................................. 50

V IN (Signal information) .......................... 64

V OUT (Signal information) ....................... 64

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP) ............... 81

VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 26

VIDEO jack ............................................... 17

Video Out (Option menu) ......................... 65

Video pin cable ........................................ 17

Video signal flow ...................................... 96

Video signal type ...................................... 81

Video/audio input jack combination ......... 24

Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 39

Virtual Presence Speaker ........................... 6

Volume (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 75

Volume Interlock (Option menu) .............. 65

Volume Trim (Option menu) ..................... 64

VPS ............................................................. 6

vTuner ID (Network information) .............. 79

Warning message (YPAO) ....................... 33

Windows Media Player ............................. 53

Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic

Optimizer .............................................. 30

YPAO ........................................................ 30

YPAO MIC jack ......................................... 30

YPAO microphone .................................... 30

ZB.Trim (Option menu) ............................. 61

ZONE A key .............................................. 61

Zone B ...................................................... 60

ZONE B key .............................................. 61

Zone B operation ...................................... 61

Zone B preparation .................................. 60

Zone B speaker connections ................... 60

Zone B volume adjustment ...................... 61

ZoneB (Setup menu) ................................ 69

ZoneB Trim (Option menu) ....................... 61

Documenttranscriptie

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual English Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 FEATURES 5 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 30 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PLAYBACK 34 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 PREPARATIONS 11 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 En 2 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 58 APPENDIX 86 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 CONFIGURATIONS 66 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 80 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 En 3 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the HTR-5065 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 4 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.46 • USB . p.50 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.53 • Internet radio . p.56 • AirPlay . p.58 Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*) speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.30 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) * * . p.37 • Enjoying compressed music with . p.41 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.60 (Zone B)* Network contents * HTR-5065 only Speakers Audio iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio HDMI Control USB device 3D and 4K signals supported Audio HDMI Control Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) Operating external devices with the supplied remote control . p.82 TV AV receiver (the unit) The unit’s remote control . p.35 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control . p.96 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 5 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.23) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.37) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.74). BD/DVD player I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.72). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. CD player Game console I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese (p.29). Camcorder TV Set-top box ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18) When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42) I want to update the firmware... The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. Use “Network Update” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu or “UPDATE” (p.81) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware. ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.40) Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. • Scene settings (p.35) ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. • Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.62) • Various function settings (p.67) • System settings (p.80) ❑ Low power consumption Video from external device The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption and helps to create an eco-friendly home theater system (p.76). FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : A YPAO MIC DIRECT INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA B 1 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.72) • Standby Through is enabled (p.72) • Network Standby is enabled (p.78) • An iPod is being charged (p.46) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.30). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.4). 5 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34). 6 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.43). VIDEO AUX VIDEO AUDIO C D E F G H USB iPod/iPhone/iPad 5V 2.1A I 7 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.44). 8 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.42). 9 TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.42). 0 Front display Displays information (p.8). A DIRECT key Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.40). B PHONES jack For connecting headphones. C INPUT keys Select an input source. D TONE CONTROL key J E SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.35). F PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.36). G STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.39). H VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game consoles (p.26). I USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.50) or an iPod (p.46). J VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.63). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 7 Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC STEREO 3 TUNED OUT 6 7 8 SLEEP SP A SP B 9 VOL. MUTE SW C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR : 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.37) is working. CINEMA DSP n Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) is working. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) is working. 4 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.63) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. A 6 ZONE indicators (HTR-5065 only) “SP A” lights up when the Zone A speaker output is enabled and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B speaker output is enabled (p.61). 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 9 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 0 Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. > B B Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. L Subwoofer A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L)* J Surround back speaker (R)* K Surround back speaker* * HTR-5065 only A Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.34). TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 Rear panel 1 3 2 4 5 (HTR-5065 U.S.A. model) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) NETWORK ARC ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO 7 8 9 : 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–4 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). 3 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26). 4 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.27). 5 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.28). 6 AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.23). A 7 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.28). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. A SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.15). 8 AUDIO jacks For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.25). • The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on HTR-5065 only. 9 SUBWOOFER jack For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15). 0 MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks: For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.22). VIDEO jack: For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.22). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. CODE SET 2 SOURCE RECEIVER E Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE/RECEIVER key HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is operated with the remote control (p.83). You can operate the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device when this key lights up in green. AV 3 2 SOURCE z key 1 F RECEIVER z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. ZONE 3 Input selection keys TUNER 4 FM AM 5 INFO MEMORY 6 MOVIE MUSIC 7 SLEEP 8 9 : PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER BD DVD TV NET RADIO G OPTION SETUP 4 Radio keys VOLUME ENTER RETURN H DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 C DIRECT SCENE TOP MENU A B TUNING Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO AUDIO jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio 2 3 4 I Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.42). FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. 5 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34). 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 6 Sound mode keys ENT Select a sound mode (p.36). TV D INPUT TV VOL TV CH 7 SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). MUTE 9 SETUP key Displays the setup menu (p.66). 0 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A MODE key Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception (p.42). Switches the iPod operation modes (p.48). B External device operation keys Let you play back and select menus and perform other operations for external devices (p.83). C Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. D TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.82). E CODE SET button Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote control (p.82). F ZONE keys (HTR-5065 only) Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.61). ★/★★ keys (HTR-4065 only) Change the external device to be controlled without switching the input source (p.83). G OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.62). H VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.82). 8 SCENE keys (HTR-5065) Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.35). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.12) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.15) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.18) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.23) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting to a network (p.27) Connect the unit to a network. 7 Connecting recording devices (p.28) Connect recording devices to the unit. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.28) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.29) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.30) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 11 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • (U.S.A. model only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14). • (Except for U.S.A. model) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω. Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. Function 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround back (L)* 6 Surround back (R)* 7 Surround back* 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. 9 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. Subwoofer Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 7.1* 6.1* 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● * HTR-5065 only • HTR-5065 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and HTR-4065 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 12 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7.1-channel system (HTR-5065 only) 1 9 5.1-channel system 1 2 3 9 4 5 10° to 30° 3 4 10° to 30° 6 2 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 7 30 cm (1 ft) or more 6.1-channel system (HTR-5065 only) 1 9 4.1-channel system 1 2 3 9 4 5 10° to 30° 2 10° to 30° 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 8 PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance 3.1-channel system (U.S.A. model only) 1 9 2 3 Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) STRAIGHT 3 2.1-channel system SPIMP.8MIN 1 9 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. 2 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. 5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system (HTR-5065 only) The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS PB FRONT Caution CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SPEAKERS PB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. SINGLE Y OR OUT OR OUT SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – + – 1 2 1 2 Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) 9 4 3 9 5 3 4 5 6 7 • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections (HTR-5065 only) When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND c FR ON T d Connecting Zone B speakers (HTR-5065 only) d Tighten the terminal. b • Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE + (red) Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only)” (p.60). a - (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A. and China models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug a 1 FR ON T 2 3 9 b 4 5 ■ Connecting the subwoofer Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. MONIT Audio pin cable AV6 Y OR OU T AV OUT AUDIO SUBW OOFER PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ VIDEO jacks ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. (Stereo L/R jacks) Video pin cable Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable. Stereo pin cable HDMI cable ■ Audio jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. • To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. Stereo mini-plug cable Digital optical cable • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output) features. OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ■ Video jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Digital coaxial cable Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Component video cable PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 17 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection Method 1 (p.18) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) Yes ■ Connection Method 2 (p.20) ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. No Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.96). ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. No Does your TV support HDMI Control? About HDMI Control Yes ■ Connection Method 3 (p.21) No • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.72) in the “Setup” menu. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI input (ARC-compatible) HDMI OUT ■ Connection Method 4 (p.22) HDMI OUT HDMI HDM HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) ARC ARC HDMI ARC HDMI ANTEN AM When connecting a video device with an analog video output PR PB • If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.22). • If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.22). Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 TV • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 18 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press SETUP. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION SETUP e Check the following. SETUP Cursor keys ENTER POP UP d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. Sound ECO Function • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Network Language • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20). e Press ENTER again. f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input AV4 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN g Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.72) in the “Setup” menu. The unit (rear) 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. HDMI OUT jack HDMI input HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI (BD/DVD) ARC ARC HDMI a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI ANTENNA AM FM b Press SETUP. PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO OPTION SETUP VIDEO OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 O O VOLUME ENTER A (TV) O AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) TV RETURN DISPLAY TOP SETUP Cursor keys ENTER POP UP c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Sound ECO Function Network Language d Press ENTER again. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input AV4 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN f Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack HDMI input b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. HDMI OUT HDMI OUT c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI (BD/DVD) ARC ARC HDMI d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI ANTENNA AM FM PR e Check the following. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 O O A (TV) O AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) TV If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. The unit (rear) When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. HDMI OUT If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 Video input (composite video) HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) VIDEO ARC V V ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT PR PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT OPTICAL SUBWOOFER AUDIO O O (TV) AV 4 • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) Video input (component video) MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO PR COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) PR HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) PR PR PB PB Y Y PB PB ARC Y ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT PR PB Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT OPTICAL SUBWOOFER O O AUDIO (TV) AV 4 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. – Connecting an iPod (p.46) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting a USB storage device (p.50) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24). Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video Video output (component video) AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) ■ HDMI connection PR PR HDMI OUT Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. ARC HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) PB PR PR PB PB Y Y PB Y AM HDMI 1–4 jacks HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 Y COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) Y COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO The unit (rear) O O C C OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI output HDMI ARC ANTENNA FM HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. MONITOR OUT OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 3 Video device OPTICAL HDMI Y VIDEO AV 2 COAXIAL HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) AM COAXIAL SUBWOOFER AUDIO Video device • To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22). If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.18 to 21). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 23 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Video Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) HDMI Audio Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–4 AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO Video output (composite video) Component video AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack VIDEO V HDMI OUT ❑ Necessary setting HDMI 2 HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) ARC V VIDEO For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. ANTENNA AM FM PR PB Video device Y COMPONENT VIDEO Video output (component video) VIDEO C C COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 COAXIAL AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO AV OUT O O OPTICAL OPTICAL L PR L L The unit (rear) The unit (rear) PR L HDMI OUT R PR R R PB HDMI 2 HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) Y ARC PB PB R ANTENNA AM Y FM Y PR Audio output Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, (either digital optical, AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO L VIDEO AUDIO L If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 L L R AV OUT R R Video device R AV 5 • To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22). AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A BD DVD TV NET RADIO AV OPTION SETUP TOP OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN AV 2 DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER The unit (rear) POP UP HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 (BD/DVD) ARC 3 4 O Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO AudioIn Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be used). VOL. AudioAV5 6 OPTICAL OPTICAL C C COAXIAL COAXIAL MONITOR O L VOL. 5 O ANTENNA AM PR OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUB L L L R R R Audio device R AUDIO AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO jacks Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as camcorders and portable audio players to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna SCENE BD DVD INPUT TONE CONTROL TV NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX USB The unit (rear) AUDIO VIDEO iPod/iPhone/iPad 5V 2.1A HDMI OUT The unit (front) V HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) NETWORK ARC ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS FRONT Y COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BA /ZONE Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO Portable audio player Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22). • You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device. Hold down Insert Release • For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.46) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.50). • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting to a network Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. WAN PC LAN Modem Router Network cable HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) NETWORK ARC ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB FRONT Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO The unit (rear) • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.77). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recording device connections 8 Power cable connection 9 10 7 Connecting recording devices You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input. 8 Connecting the power cable After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet NETWORK • To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks or VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks, AUDIO jacks, or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit. SPEAKERS FRONT • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Video/audio input AV OUT jacks VIDEO The unit (rear) V HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 V L HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) ARC L L R R R ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB AV OUT Video recording device AUDIO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting recording devices En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Language setting 10 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B AV 1 1 2 ZONE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING 6 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO SETUP OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER 3 4 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. MUTE MODE Setup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Network 中文 Language TV CH MUTE 5 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Setup Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Network 中文 Language PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV 1 B The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. The unit (front) ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. 1 RADIO – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. OPTION SETUP • Please note the following when using YPAO. 2 – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 – Do not connect headphones. 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). YPAO microphone Listening 5 position 4 8 ENT Ear height • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. TV MUTE 3 4 INPUT TV VOL 9 TV CH 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 9 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. The following screen appears on the TV. MAX Auto Setup Start Exit • (HTR-5065 only) If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. PREPARATIONS ➤ Press SETUP key to Start Power Amp Assign Basic “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.69) (HTR-5065 only) Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup CODE SET • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the measurement. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B • A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. • If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. AV • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). ZONE • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET 5 TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press SETUP. Auto Setup ENHANCER SCENE TV NET DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Result 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN SAVE 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch RADIO OPTION SETUP Exit The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. DIRECT Measurement Finished Start MUSIC SLEEP BD DVD 6 MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.32). The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. MODE • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. Auto Setup 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Start Exit Measurement Finished Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m TV INPUT TV VOL 4 TV CH -3.0 / +10.0 dB MUTE 1 7 2 This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. Caution 4 • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.32) or “Warning messages” (p.33). PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Auto Setup Start ERROR E-5:Noisy Error message Exit PROCEED 5% TV screen Error message Cause Remedy E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL (E-4:SBR → SBL) A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. (E-6:CHECK SUR) Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. VOL. E-5:NOISY L SL SW C R SR Front display ■ Procedure to handle errors 1 2 Check the content of error message and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To exit the YPAO measurement: a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Auto Setup Warning message Cause W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the A speaker cable may be connected with the unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable. reverse polarity (+/-). Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. Measurement Finished Start Result Exit 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB Warning message W-1:Out of Phase Remedy TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) VOL. W-1:PHASE L SL SW C R SR Front display • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. ■ Procedure to handle warnings 1 Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 33 PLAYBACK CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET Input selection keys AV B ZONE Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO TUNING INFO MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT 3 SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP RETURN VOLUME For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MUTE Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. VOL. AudioDecoder 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 R SR VOL. ProLogic L SL SW C R SR Information • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.50) 4 8 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.53) ENT TV INPUT TV VOL SW C Item name • Playing back iPod music (p.46) 2 L SL About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42) MODE 1 1 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. VOLUME ENTER Switching information on the front display TV CH • Listening to Internet radio (p.56) MUTE • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.58) 4 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI 1–4 AV 1–6 AUDIO V-AUX Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. USB SERVER AirPlay • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.63). NET RADIO Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) TUNER * (Europe model only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.45). PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 34 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 Input selection keys AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones (HTR-5065 only) with just one touch. 1 ZONE TUNER FM INFO 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. AM PRESET Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments TUNING MEMORY • Select an input source (p.34) • Select a sound program (p.36) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. DIRECT • (HTR-5065 only) Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.61) SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE OPTION SETUP Input Sound program Compressed Target zone Music (HTR-5065 Enhancer only) VOLUME ENTER RETURN SCENE DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off MUTE SCENE link playback Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled On On 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SETComplete 10 TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled NET NET RADIO MUSIC (7ch/5ch Stereo*) On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled Off RADIO MUSIC TUNER (7ch/5ch Stereo*) On Zone A: enabled Zone B: disabled Off ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. MODE 1 Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. 3 L SL SW C R SR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.83) to register it. * HTR-5065: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4065: 5ch Stereo • The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 35 Selecting the sound mode CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.37) ZONE TUNER FM Press MOVIE repeatedly. AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP POP-UP MENU Press MUSIC repeatedly. Selecting a surround decoder (p.40) Switching to the straight decode mode (p.39) Press STRAIGHT. DISPLAY TOP MENU Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback (p.38) Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. VOLUME ENTER RETURN MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER MUTE MODE Switching to the direct playback mode (p.40) Press DIRECT. 1 2 3 4 Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) 5 6 7 8 Press ENHANCER. 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM on the front panel. • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.39) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 36 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Sci-Fi L SL SW C R SR Sound program • When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. • You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.63) in the “Option” menu. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 37 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo 5ch Stereo (HTR-5065: 7ch Stereo, HTR-4065: 5ch Stereo) Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enjoying unprocessed playback CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your room. ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AV CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions are met. ZONE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. 1 VOL. VOLUME ENTER RETURN TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV TV VOL MUTE TV CH L SL SW C VOL. R SR MUTE MODE INPUT 3 Hall in Vienna DISPLAY ENT Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up OPTION SETUP • One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo) is selected (p.37). When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. STRAIGHT L SL SW C R SR • (HTR-5065 only) To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.63) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39 ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.93). B 1 ZONE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SUR.DECODE ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. TUNING TV NET RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE ProLogic bPro Logic bPLIIx Movie* bPLIIx Music* 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Press DIRECT. Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. VOL. bPLII Music 1 1 VOL. bPLII Movie MODE When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. DIRECT L SL SW C R SR OPTION SETUP Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) bPLII Game DIRECT L SL SW C R SR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies. Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music. • When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Selecting sound programs – Adjusting the tone control – Operating the on-screen menu – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) bPLIIx Game* Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games. Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH * HTR-5065 only (HTR-5065 only) • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. • You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 40 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. B ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT ENHANCER SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. OPTION SETUP “ENHANCER” lights up VOLUME ENTER ENHANCER RETURN VOL. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Enhancer On L SL SW C R SR MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz – High-definition streaming audio TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.64) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 41 Listening to FM/AM radio CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B AV 1 TUNER ZONE FM AM TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING TUNING • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in a Europe model. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press FM or AM to select a band. VOL. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER FM87.50MHz DIRECT SLEEP SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 3 OPTION SETUP TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE MODE Use the following keys to set a frequency. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). VOL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH STEREO TUNED Numeric keys FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR ENT “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. MUTE “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.65) in the “Option” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 42 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) CODE SET • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV B ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. TUNING TUNER MEMORY PRESET ■ Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. VOL. Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). AutoPreset SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP • To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press OPTION. MUTE MODE 1 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • (Europe model only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. 4 8 Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. ENT VOL. TV INPUT TV VOL AutoPreset TV CH MUTE ■ Registering a radio station manually Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.42) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. VOL. STEREO TUNED 4 To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset VOL. 01:FM98.50MHz SW C R SR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. 01:FM87.50MHz Preset number from which to start the registration L SL VOL. STEREO TUNED 02:Empty L SL SW C R SR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 43 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV B ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING TUNER PRESET ■ Selecting a preset station ■ Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. 2 3 Press OPTION. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PRESET DIRECT SLEEP 01:FM98.50MHz SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP L SL SW C ClearPreset R SR OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN VOL. VOL. STEREO TUNED DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. TOP MENU POP-UP MENU • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MUTE VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 L SL SW C R SR Preset station to be cleared Numeric keys If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH VOL. MUTE 01:Cleared L SL SW C R SR 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 44 Radio Data System tuning CODE SET • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. SOURCE RECEIVER (Europe model only) HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AV ZONE TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO TUNING INFO MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT 1 SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.43). 2 Press INFO. INFO 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. VOL. STEREO TUNED ProgramType L SL SW C R SR ENT • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. TV MUTE When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. Item name INPUT TV VOL ■ Receiving traffic information automatically TV CH About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. 9850 VOL. CLASSICS SW C FINISH VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz STEREO TUNED L SL The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. L SL SW C R SR R SR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 45 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22). To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48). 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. Supported iPods (as of December 2011) • iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.) • iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone • iPad2, iPad The unit (front) RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT AUDIO USB VIDEO USB iPod/iPhone/iPad 5V 2.1A VOL. Connected L SL SW C R SR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change until full. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 46 Playback of iPod content CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. USB • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48). ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING 1 MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP TV NET ■ Browse screen 1 4 iPod Music Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. 2 RADIO Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers 5 OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE 3 iPod Music Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers DISPLAY 2 Contents list Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 1/6 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 3 Item number/total 8 4 Status indicators ENT TV • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. INPUT TV VOL 1/6 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing 1 List name MODE 1 • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.48). The browse screen is displayed on the TV. SCENE BD DVD • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. TV CH MUTE 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. iPod Now Playing Moves to the previous page of the list. Artist Name Moves to the next page of the list. Album Name Song Title 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse 5:10 Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 47 ■ Playback screen CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 1 HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 iPod Now Playing AV ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B Album Name 2 Song Title 2:30 ZONE 5:10 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY [DISPLAY] to List Browse PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 1 Status indicators MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status (such as play/pause). SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET 2 Playback information VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV VOL MUTE Operational remote control keys Function 4 Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. a Function External device operation keys a Resumes playback from pause. MODE s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. 8 ENT f TV INPUT Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. External device operation keys MUTE MODE 1 2 RADIO OPTION SETUP Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. Artist Name TV CH g Skips forward/backward. External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (while holding down). h j Searches forward/backward (by holding down). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 48 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings CODE SET You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. B ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER 1 DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. MUTE Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. MODE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Shuffle (Shuffle) ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 49 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B USB • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). ZONE • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. RADIO • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files. OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connecting a USB storage device DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. The unit (front) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 RADIO 10 ENT • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. USB TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH AUDIO VIDEO iPod/iPhone/iPad 5V 2.1A MUTE USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking USB 1/12 USB storage device • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB Connected VOL. L SL SW C R SR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 50 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 HDMI 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 4 AV 2 USB Now Playing ZONE TUNER FM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 Artist Name AM 4 USB Top 5 1/12 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name Song Title SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER 2:30 1 List name [DISPLAY] to List Browse 2 Contents list DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION SETUP 3 Item number/total VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV TV VOL 4 8 Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function ENT Moves 10 pages backward. INPUT MUTE DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. MODE 1 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN TV CH Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 51 ■ Playback screen CODE SET ■ Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 USB Now Playing AV 1 Artist Name 5 6 AUDIO V-AUX USB NET A Album Name Song Title B TUNER AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER 1 Status indicators SCENE TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY D TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MUTE MODE External device operation keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys TV CH Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Function a TV INPUT • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status (such as play/pause). DIRECT SLEEP TV VOL Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT RETURN 2 [DISPLAY] to List Browse FM BD DVD When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 ZONE 1 Skips forward/backward. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) MUTE 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 52 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. ZONE • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. TUNING • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files. B NET TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. HDMI 1 RADIO • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Cursor keys ENTER You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Media sharing setup Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. SERVER Media Server DESKTOP NAS A NAS B NOTE ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 1 Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. 2 In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed 1/4 • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 53 3 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. ■ Browse screen 1 HDMI 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 4 AV 2 SERVER Now Playing ZONE TUNER FM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 Artist Name AM 4 SERVER NAS A 5 1/14 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name Song Title SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER 2:30 1 List name [DISPLAY] to List Browse 2 Contents list DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION SETUP 3 Item number/total VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status (such as play/pause). TV VOL 4 8 Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function ENT Moves 10 pages backward. TV INPUT MUTE DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 5 Operation menu MODE 1 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN TV CH Moves to the previous page of the list. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 54 ■ Playback screen CODE SET ■ Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 SERVER Now Playing AV 1 Artist Name 5 6 AUDIO V-AUX USB NET A Album Name Song Title B TUNER AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ENHANCER 1 Status indicators SCENE TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP OPTION VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY D TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MUTE 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys External device operation keys Function 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. ENT INPUT TV VOL TV CH g 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) f TV • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. Item MODE 1 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status (such as play/pause). DIRECT SLEEP MUTE Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT RETURN 2 [DISPLAY] to List Browse FM BD DVD When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 ZONE 1 Skips forward/backward. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.78). 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 55 Listening to Internet radio CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AV 1 B 1 Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. NET ZONE • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE TV NET RADIO • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help • This service may be discontinued without notice. DIRECT SLEEP BD DVD NET RADIO Top • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 1/7 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT NET RADIO Now Playing TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH Station Name Album Name Song Title 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 56 ■ Browse screen CODE SET ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER 1 HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 4 NET RADIO Top 1 2 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B 2 ZONE 1 NET RADIO Now Playing AV Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help 5 Station Name 2 Album Name Song Title 2:30 TUNER FM 3 AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER SCENE TV NET 1 List name 1 Playback indicator 2 Contents list 2 Playback information Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. RADIO OPTION SETUP [DISPLAY] to List Browse DIRECT SLEEP BD DVD 1/7 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 3 Item number/total VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Cursor keys ENTER MUTE External device operation keys 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV MUTE Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. ENT Moves to the previous page of the list. INPUT TV VOL • Some information may not be available depending on the station. 5 Operation menu MODE 1 • Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. 4 Playback indicator TV CH Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 57 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router The unit Starts playback on iTunes or iPod Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Playback starts iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. Supported iTunes/iPods (as of December 2011) • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. • iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 58 CODE SET • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu. AV B • To adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.65) in the “Option” menu to “Limited” (default) or “Full”. ZONE FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET Caution TUNING • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET iTunes (example of English version) • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. TUNER INFO • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. RADIO OPTION SETUP ■ Playback screen RETURN Check this box VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY D TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 1 AirPlay Now Playing MUTE MODE Artist Name External device operation keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Album Name 2 Song Title 2:30 5:30 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 59 Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms simultaneously. Preparing Zone B Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables. To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to “ZoneB” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Study room (Zone B) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS PB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y OR OUT Living room (Zone A) SUBWOOFER • Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B. • The same input source and volume setting are applied to both zones. 1 • You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection (p.35) 1 9 2 2 3 4 5 Zone B Zone A PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) En 60 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV B ZONE ■ Adjusting the volume for Zone B 1 If you are bothered by volume differences between Zone A/B, follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B. Input selection keys Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio output to Zone A or Zone B. ZONE A ZONE B “SP A” lights up in the front display when the Zone A output is enabled and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B output is enabled. HDMI 1 ■ Basic playback procedure 1 2 TUNER FM “SP A” and/or “SP B” light up AM PRESET INFO Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and press ENTER. TUNING VOL. MEMORY SP A SP B SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press OPTION. HDMI1 MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT L SL SW C • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. R SR • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. VOLUME 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. Default 0.0 dB DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 3 OPTION OPTION SETUP 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (HTR-5065 only) En 61 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. OPTION VOL. ToneControl L SL SW C Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 63 DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. 63 Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 63 (HTR-5065 only) Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 63 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 64 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 64 Front display Option Tone Control DSP/Surround Volume Trim Lipsync Signal Info Audio In DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Extended Surround (EXTD) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Page R SR Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (SW.Trim) 64 (HTR-5065 only) Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. 61 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. 64 Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 64 Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 65 Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 65 Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. 43 Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 44 ZoneB Trim (ZB.Trim) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. (Europe model only) Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) 45 En 62 Item Function Page Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.49), USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55). — Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.49), USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55). — Volume Interlock (Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 65 ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Default Bypass (Bypass) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Volume: low On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Output level Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) ❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) On Off Input level ❑ Extended Surround (EXTD) (HTR-5065 only) Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) Configures the sound field program and surround settings. ❑ DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. Setting range -6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments) Default 0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 63 ■ Lipsync (Lipsync) • Some Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. In this case, the unit reproduces the signals in 5.1-channel if “Extended Surround” is set to “Auto”. To reproduce the signals in 6.1 or 7.1-channel, set it to “bPLIIx Movie”, “bPLIIx Music”, or “EX/ES”. Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Setup” menu. ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41). • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41). Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) (default) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. ■ Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Choices Default USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, TUNER: On (On) Others: Off (Off) ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal Channel (CHAN) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 64 ■ Audio In (Audio In) ■ Volume Interlock (Interlock) Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Input sources HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2 Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (Ltd) (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Select “AV 5”, “AV 6”, or “AUDIO”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. ■ Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. Settings Off (Off) (default) Does not output video. HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 65 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 4 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 66 Setup menu items Menu Item Configuration Function Power Amp Assign (HTR-5065 only) Selects a speaker system. Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 69 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 69 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 69 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 70 Surround Back (HTR-5065 only) Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 70 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 70 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 70 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 70 Speaker HDMI Page 69 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 71 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 71 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 71 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 71 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 72 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 72 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 72 TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 72 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 73 ARC Enables/disables ARC. 73 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 73 Configuration CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 67 Menu Item Function Page CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 73 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 73 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 74 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 74 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 74 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 74 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 74 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 75 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 75 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 75 Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 75 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 76 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 76 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 77 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 77 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 77 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 78 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 78 DSP Parameter Sound Lipsync Volume ECO Function Network Language Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 78 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 78 Information Displays the network information on the unit. 79 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 79 Select an on-screen menu language. 79 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 68 ❑ Subwoofer Speaker Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Configures the speaker settings manually. Settings Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Use (default) Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Network Language ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. ■ Configuration Settings Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. ❑ Power Amp Assign (HTR-5065 only) Selects a speaker system. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection. ❑ Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Basic (default) Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.16). ZoneB Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.60) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A). Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 69 ❑ Surround ❑ Crossover Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. ❑ Surround Back Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. ❑ Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Settings (HTR-5065 only) Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Small x2 (default) Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel audio. Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. ❑ Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. • “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 70 ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. • “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.30). ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5065 only), Surround Back R (HTR-5065 only), Subwoofer 1 2 Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Equalizer ■ Level EQ Select GEQ Edit Channel 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (HTR-5065 only), Surround Back R (HTR-5065 only), Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB Others: -1.0 dB GEQ Front L Back:RETURN 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. ■ Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings ❑ EQ Select Off (default) Does not output test tones. Selects the type of equalizer to be used. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Settings PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.30). GEQ (default) Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Off Does not use the equalizer. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 71 HDMI HDMI OUT (TV) Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Configures the HDMI settings. Setup Speaker Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. Configuration HDMI ❑ Standby Through Sound ECO Function Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Network Language Settings ■ Configuration ❑ HDMI Control Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes approximately 1 W of power.) Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.96). Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Settings AV 1–6, AUDIO ❑ Audio Output Default AV 4 Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 72 ❑ Standby Sync Sound Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Configures the audio output settings. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Setup Speaker DSP Parameter HDMI Lipsync Sound Volume ECO Function Network Language ❑ ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. ■ DSP Parameter Configures the surround decoder settings. ❑ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch Stereo). Settings ❑ SCENE Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. On (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Choices (SCENE keys) BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO Settings ❑ Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is selected. Settings Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. Default BD/DVD, TV: On NET, RADIO: Off • SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 73 ❑ Center Width ■ Lipsync Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is selected. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Setting range 0 to 7 Default 3 ❑ Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (HTR-5065 only) is selected. Setting range -3 to +3 • You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.64) in the “Option” menu. ❑ Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Default 0 ❑ Center Image • “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. ❑ Adjustment Setting range 0.0 to 1.0 Default 0.3 Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Setting range 0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 74 ■ Volume ECO Configures the volume settings. Configures the power supply settings. ❑ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Setup Speaker Auto Power Down HDMI ECO Mode Sound ECO Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Min/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Function Network Language ■ Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. ❑ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Settings Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. Default +16.5 dB 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. ❑ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. Default Europe model: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 75 ■ ECO Mode Function Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Settings Setup Off (default) Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. Speaker Input Rename HDMI Dimmer Sound Memory Guard ECO Function Network Language • Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. ■ Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. Input sources HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6, AUDIO, USB, V-AUX ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press ENTER. • To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Input Rename HDMI1 B l u - r a y OK:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN 3 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. • To cancel the entry, press RETURN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 76 4 5 To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3. Network To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Configures the network settings. ■ Dimmer Setup Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.76) is set to “On”. ■ Memory Guard Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. o DMC Control ECO Network Standby Function Network Name Network Information Language Network Update ■ IP Address Select whether to use a DHCP server. Settings • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. On MAC Address Filter Sound ❑ DHCP Settings Memory Guard IP Address HDMI Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Memory Guard Speaker Icon Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Back:RETURN Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 77 ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Network Standby Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). ❑ Filter Settings Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes approximately 2 W of power.) Settings Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. 3 Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 ■ Procedure 1 2 ■ Network Name Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Network Name To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Y A M A H A x x x x x x ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Back:RETURN 3 4 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78 ■ Information Language Displays the network information on the unit. MAC Address IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) Select an on-screen menu language. MAC address The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner) Setup Speaker English HDMI Français Sound Deutsch ECO Español Function Русский Network 中文 Language Settings ■ Network Update English (default) English Updates the firmware via the network. Français French ❑ Perform Update Deutsch German Español Spanish Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.85). ❑ Firmware Version Russian Chinese Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. ❑ System ID • Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Displays the system ID number. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) (U.S.A. model only) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 SPIMP.8MIN Set the unit to standby mode. Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). Settings z (power) PROGRAM 3 4 5 STRAIGHT 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 Ω MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. REMOTEIDID1 Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Item Function Page SP IMP. (U.S.A. model only) Changes the speaker impedance setting. 80 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 80 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 81 INIT Restores the default settings. 81 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 81 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 81 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. 1 Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 2 3 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1. • The registered remote control codes (p.82) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 80 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) Updating the firmware (UPDATE) TVFORMATNTSC Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. Settings NTSC, PAL UPDATEUSB New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. Default U.S.A. model: NTSC Other models: PAL 1 Restoring the default settings (INIT) INITCANCEL Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the “Network Update” screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.85). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) VERSIONxx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 81 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER CODE SET You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B AV 1 ZONE AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT NET • If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the codes again. If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. ■ TV operations RADIO • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. SCENE TV Press TV z. • Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. SLEEP BD DVD 3 4 • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. TUNER FM Controlling external devices with the remote control SOURCE/RECEIVER Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Registering the remote control code for a TV MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. Numeric keys TV operation keys INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV TV z Turns on/off the TV. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH TV operation keys TV z • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.83). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 82 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE z CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER Registering the remote control codes for playback devices HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET Input selection keys AV B ZONE TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING • (HTR-4065 only) If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★ or ★★) key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source after pressing the star key. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. DIRECT SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN Menu operation keys Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. ■ Playback device operations Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. • By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. SOURCE z Menu operation keys Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 External device operation keys DISPLAY • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 8 Numeric keys 2 ENT TV operation keys TV VOL Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. TV INPUT Switches information on the display. MUTE MODE 1 Returns to the previous screen. DISPLAY D Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. TV CH MUTE 3 4 External device operation keys TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. h j Press the input selection key. f For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack. g Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.82). • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.35). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 83 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET B Input selection keys AV Resetting remote control codes You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection key. 1 ZONE SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 2 3 SLEEP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU Press the input selection key. Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”. Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. DISPLAY TOP MENU Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. MUTE If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1. MODE To reset the remote control to factory default settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT a Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. Numeric keys b Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 84 Updating the unit’s firmware CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. HDMI 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO A V-AUX USB NET AV 1 Note TUNER AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER • To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81). DIRECT Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update starts. B ZONE FM 4 5 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. SLEEP The firmware update is complete. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO SETUP OPTION SETUP VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE Cursor keys ENTER • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81). 1 2 Press SETUP. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and press ENTER. 4 8 ENT Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER. TV CH If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the “Network Update” screen. Network Update p Icon Perform Update Firmware Version System ID x.xx xxxxxxxx Update:ENTER Back:RETURN • To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware En 85 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the front display when selecting an input source... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.30). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.69). By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.76) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.75). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.75). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.77). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.80). I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 86 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power and system Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.75). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.80). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 87 Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. (HTR-5065 only) No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). (HTR-5065 only) Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.75). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.71). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.69). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.71). (HTR-5065 only) Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.63). “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”. When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”, you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.69). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.70). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.30) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.69). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 88 Problem No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.72). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.72). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.73). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.76). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.98). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 89 Problem Cause Remedy The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Cause Remedy The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. FM/AM radio Problem There is multi-path interference. FM radio reception is weak or noisy. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.42). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.42). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.42). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.43). Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. USB and network Problem The unit does not detect the USB device. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.77). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.77). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 90 Problem The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. Cause Remedy The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.53). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.82). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. Remote control Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 91 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.53). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.27). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Connect error The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.46). USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Unable to play APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 92 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 93 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 94 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 95 Video signal flow Information on HDMI Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. Video device The unit TV HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23). Operations available from the TV’s remote control HDMI in HDMI • Standby synchronization HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.35) VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) VIDEO • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.83) APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 96 (Example) 7 HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”). 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 97 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals) • 576p/50 Hz • 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals) • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 98 Reference diagram (rear panel) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 (BD/DVD) NETWORK ARC ANTENNA AM FM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB PB SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI AMP /ZONE B SINGLE Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 ( TV ) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO (HTR-5065 U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 99 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. (For HTR-4065) Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. (For HTR-5065) Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. This receiver supports network connections. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows® Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 100 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO, V-AUX [Mini Jack]) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) • Video • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 USB • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory HDMI • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, Network ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K • PC Client Function • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, V-AUX) - 480i/60 Hz • AirPlay supported Component x 2 (AV 1–2) - 576i/50 Hz • Internet Radio • HDMI Input HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4) • Other USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX) Output jacks • Analog Audio - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz Compatible Decoding Formats - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Decoding Format - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz - Dolby Digital EX - 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - Dolby Digital - 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, • Audio Format [HTR-5065] - Dolby TrueHD - Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, - Dolby Digital Plus DTS Express - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround SURROUND BACK L/R*) - Dolby Digital * Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, - DTS-HD Master Audio [HTR-5065] - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - Dolby Pro Logic - Subwoofer Out x 1 - DTS Express - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby - AV OUT x 1 - DTS - Headphone x 1 - DSD 6-ch [HTR-4065] - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B] - Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible - Subwoofer Out x 1 - AV OUT x 1 - Headphone x 1 • Video • Post Decoding Format Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema [HTR-4065] • Link Function: CEC supported TUNER • Analog Tuner MONITOR OUT [Europe model] - Component x 1 FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - Composite x 1 [Other models] AV OUT FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema - Composite x 1 APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 101 Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) [U.S.A. model] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W [U.S.A. model] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W Center ............................................................................... 95 W Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]............................. 95 W+95 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) [U.S.A. model] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front L/R .................................................................... 115 W/ch • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................. 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation Center ....................................................................... 115 W/ch AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Surround L/R.............................................................. 115 W/ch ................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]................................. 115 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) [China model] Front L/R .................................................................... 135 W/ch • Volume Control Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics Center ........................................................................ 135 W/ch Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Surround L/R.............................................................. 135 W/ch Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz Surround Back L/R [HTR-5065]................................. 135 W/ch Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. model] Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics Front L/R (8/6/4 Ω) ............................................ 110/130/160 W (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [Other models] H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround)................................ 12 dB/oct. Front L/R (6/4 Ω) ...................................................... 110/130 W H.P.F. (Surround Back [HTR-5065]).......................... 12 dB/oct. • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. model] 8 Ω .................................................................................. 0.2 dB • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Video Section • Video Signal Type [U.S.A. model]..................................................................NTSC [Other models] ....................................................................PAL • Video Signal Level Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. model]..............................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono ................................................................................71 dB Stereo...............................................................................69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono ................................................................................. 0.3% Stereo................................................................................ 0.5% • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. model]................................................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Other models] .........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz General • Power Supply [U.S.A. model]................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Europe model] ............................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 102 • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................... 270 W/320 VA [Other models]................................................................ 280 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) ...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical) Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”) • Weight [HTR-5065] ..................................................... 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs) [HTR-4065] ..................................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 103 Index Symbols ★/★★ keys ................................................10 Envelope icon (p) ....................................85 Lock icon (o) ...........................................77 Numerics 2.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................14 2ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38 3.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................14 4.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................13 4K signal (Video resolution) ......................98 5.1-channel system (Speaker connection) ............................15 5.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................13 5ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38 6.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................13 7.1-channel system (Speaker connection) ............................15 7.1-channel system (Speaker placement) ............................13 7ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38 A A.DRC (Option menu) ...............................63 Action Game (Sound program) .................37 Adaptive DRC (Option menu) ...................63 Adjustment (Setup menu, Lipsync) ...........74 ADVANCED SETUP ..................................80 AirPlay .......................................................58 AM antenna ...............................................26 ARC .......................................................... 18 ARC (Setup menu, HDMI) ........................ 73 ARC-compatible TV (Connection) ............ 18 Audio Decoder (Front display) ................. 34 Audio device connection ......................... 25 Audio In (Option menu) ...................... 25, 65 AUDIO jack .............................................. 17 Audio Output (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72 Audio Return Channel .............................. 18 Auto Power Down (Setup menu, ECO) .... 75 Auto Preset (FM radio) ............................. 43 Automatic preset (FM radio) .................... 43 AV OUT jack ............................................. 28 B B RATE (Signal information) ..................... 64 Banana plug ............................................. 16 Bass (Option menu) ................................. 63 Battery ........................................................ 4 BI-AMP (Setup menu) .............................. 69 Bi-amp speaker connections ................... 16 Bi-amplification connection ...................... 94 Bitrate (Signal information) ....................... 64 C CAT-5 (Network cable) ............................. 27 Cellar Club (Sound program) ................... 38 Center (Setup menu, Speaker) ................ 69 Center Image (Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74 Center Width (Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74 Chamber (Sound program) ...................... 38 CHAN (Signal information) ....................... 64 Channel (Signal information) .................... 64 Charge (iPod) ........................................... 46 CINEMA DSP ............................................ 37 CINEMA DSP 3D ...................................... 39 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73 COAXIAL jack .......................................... 17 Combination of video/audio input jacks ... 24 Component video cable ........................... 17 Component video connection (Playback devices) ............................... 23 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 17 Composite video connection (Playback devices) ............................... 24 Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 41 Configuration (Scene function) ................ 35 Configuration (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72 Configuration (Setup menu, Speaker) ...... 69 Connection (Audio devices) ..................... 25 Connection (iPod) .................................... 46 Connection (NAS) .................................... 27 Connection (PC) ....................................... 27 Connection (Recording device) ............... 28 Connection (Speaker cables) .................. 16 Connection (Subwoofer) .......................... 16 Connection (USB storage device) ........... 50 Connection (Video devices) ..................... 23 Controlling external devices ..................... 82 Crossover (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 70 Crossover frequency setting (Subwoofer) .......................................... 30 Crossover frequency setting (the unit) ..... 70 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 104 D Default Gateway (Setup menu, IP Address) .....................77 DHCP (Setup menu, IP Address) ..............77 Digital coaxial cable ..................................17 Digital Media Controller ............................78 Digital optical cable ..................................17 Dimension (Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ..............74 Dimmer (Setup menu, Function) ...............77 DIRECT (Sound mode) .............................40 Direct playback .........................................40 Distance (Setup menu, Speaker) ..............71 DLNA-compatible NAS .............................53 DMC (Digital Media Controller) .................78 DMC Control (Setup menu, Network) .......78 DNS Server (Setup menu, IP Address) .....77 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ......63 Dolby Pro Logic (Surround decoder) ........40 Dolby Pro Logic II (Surround decoder) .....40 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Surround decoder) ...40 Drama (Sound program) ...........................37 DSP Level (Option menu) .........................63 DSP Parameter (Setup menu, Sound) ......73 DSP Program (Front display) ....................34 DSP/Surround (Option menu) ...................63 DTS Neo: 6 (Surround decoder) ...............40 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ...................63 Dynamic Range (Setup menu, Volume) ....75 E ECO (Setup menu) ....................................75 ECO Mode (Setup menu, ECO) ................76 Enhancer (Option menu) ...........................64 ENHANCER (Sound mode) .......................41 EQ Select (Setup menu, Equalizer) ..........71 Equalizer (Setup menu, Speaker) .............71 Error indications on the front display ....... 92 Error message (YPAO) ............................. 32 EX/ES (Extended Surround) ..................... 63 EXTD (Option menu) ................................ 63 Extended Surround (Option menu) .......... 63 External device operation keys ................ 10 Extra Bass (Setup menu, Speaker) .......... 70 F Firmware update ...................................... 85 Firmware version ...................................... 81 FM antenna .............................................. 26 FORMAT (Signal information) ................... 64 Format (Signal Information) ...................... 64 Frequency (FM/AM radio) ........................ 42 Front (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 69 Front display (Part name and functions) .... 8 Front display information .......................... 34 Front panel (Part names and functions) ..... 7 Function (Setup menu) ............................. 76 G GEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71 H Hall in Munich (Sound program) .............. 38 Hall in Vienna (Sound program) ............... 38 HDMI (Setup menu) ................................. 72 HDMI cable .............................................. 17 HDMI connection (Playback devices) ...... 23 HDMI Control ........................................... 96 HDMI Control (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72 HDMI Control-compatible TV (Connection) ........................................ 20 HDMI jack ................................................ 17 HDMI OUT (TV) (Setup menu, HDMI) ...... 72 Headphones .............................................. 7 High definition audio ................................ 98 High speed HDMI cable .......................... 17 I Impedance (Speaker) .............................. 12 In.Trim (Option menu) .............................. 64 Indicators (Part name and functions) ......... 8 INFO key .................................................. 34 Information (Front display) ....................... 34 Information (Setup menu, Network) ......... 79 INIT (ADVANCED SETUP) ........................ 81 Initial Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ....... 75 Input (Front display) ................................. 34 Input (Signal information) ......................... 64 Input Rename (Setup menu, Volume) ...... 76 Input selection keys ................................. 10 Input Trim (Option menu) ......................... 64 Interlock (Option menu) ........................... 65 Internet radio ............................................ 56 IP Address (Setup menu, Network) .......... 77 iPad .......................................................... 46 iPhone ...................................................... 46 iPod .......................................................... 46 iTunes ....................................................... 58 L Language ................................................. 29 Language (Setup menu) .......................... 29 Level (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 71 LFE ........................................................... 94 Lipsync (Option menu) ............................. 64 Lipsync (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 74 Low Frequency Effects ............................. 94 M MAC Address Filter (Setup menu, Network) ........................ 78 Manual preset (FM/AM radio) .................. 43 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 105 Manual speaker configuration (Setup menu) ........................................69 Max Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ..........75 Media Sharing ...........................................53 MEMORY (FM/AM radio) ...........................43 Memory (FM/AM radio) .............................43 Memory Guard (Setup menu, Function) ...77 MODE key .................................................42 Monaural reception mode (FM radio) .......42 Mono Movie (Sound program) ..................37 MOVIE (Sound program category) ...........37 Multiple room playback .............................60 MUSIC (Sound program category) ...........38 Music Video (Sound program) ..................38 MUTE key ..................................................34 Muting .......................................................34 N NAS ...........................................................53 Neo: 6 Cinema (Surround decoder) .........40 Neo: 6 Music (Surround decoder) ............40 NET RADIO (Input) ....................................56 Network (Setup menu) ..............................77 Network cable ...........................................27 Network information ..................................79 Network Name (Setup menu, Network) ....78 Network Standby (Setup menu, Network) .........................78 Network Update (Setup menu, Network) .........................79 NTSC (Video signal type) ..........................81 O OPTICAL jack ............................................17 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically .........................................30 OPTION key ..............................................62 Option menu ............................................ 62 Option menu item list ............................... 62 Output (Signal information) ...................... 64 P PAL (Video signal type) ............................ 81 Panorama (Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73 PC ............................................................ 53 PEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71 PHONES jack ............................................. 7 Placement (Speakers) .............................. 12 Playback (iPod) ........................................ 47 Playback (NAS) ........................................ 53 Playback (PC) .......................................... 53 Playback (Server) ..................................... 53 Playback (USB storage device) ............... 50 Playback device operations (Remote control) .................................. 83 PLII Game (Surround decoder) ................ 40 PLII Movie (Surround decoder) ................ 40 PLII Music (Surround decoder) ................ 40 PLIIx Game (Surround decoder) .............. 40 PLIIx Mo (Extended Surround) ................. 63 PLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ............ 63 PLIIx Movie (Surround decoder) .............. 40 PLIIx Mu (Extended Surround) ................. 63 PLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ............ 63 PLIIx Music (Surround decoder) .............. 40 Power Amp Assign (Setup menu, Speaker) ........................ 69 Preparation (Zone B) ................................ 60 Preset (FM/AM radio) ............................... 43 Preset station select (FM/AM radio) ......... 44 Preset stations (FM/AM radio) .................. 43 R Radio Data System ................................... 45 Rear panel (Part name and functions) ....... 9 Recording device connection .................. 28 Remote control (Part name and functions) .................... 10 Remote control code for a TV .................. 82 Remote Control Code Search .................. 83 Remote control codes for playback devices ................................................. 83 Remote control ID .................................... 80 Remote control sensor ............................... 4 Remote control signal transmitter ............ 10 REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP) ........... 80 Restore of the default settings ................. 81 Roleplaying Game (Sound program) ....... 37 Router ....................................................... 27 S SAMPL (Signal information) ..................... 64 Sampling (Signal information) .................. 64 SCENE ...................................................... 35 SCENE (Setup menu, HDMI) .................... 73 SCENE function ........................................ 35 Scene function ......................................... 35 Scene function configuration ................... 35 Sci-Fi (Sound program) ............................ 37 Server ....................................................... 53 SERVER (Input) ........................................ 53 Setup menu .............................................. 66 Setup menu item list ................................. 67 Sharing Setup ........................................... 53 Signal Info (Option menu) ........................ 64 SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 41 Simple play (iPod) .................................... 48 SLEEP key ................................................ 10 Sleep timer ............................................... 10 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 106 Sound (Setup menu) .................................73 sound field effect ......................................37 Sound mode ..............................................36 Sound program .........................................37 Sound program category ..........................37 SP A indicator ...........................................61 SP B indicator ...........................................61 SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP) ..................14 Speaker connection ..................................15 Speaker connection (Bi-amp) ...................16 Speaker connection (Zone B) ...................60 Speaker impedance ..................................12 Speaker impedance setting ......................14 Speaker indicators ......................................8 Speaker placement ...................................12 Spectacle (Sound program) .....................37 Sports (Sound program) ...........................37 Standard (Sound program) .......................37 Standby indicator ........................................7 Standby Sync (Setup menu, HDMI) ..........73 Standby Through (Setup menu, HDMI) ....72 Stereo mini jack .........................................17 Stereo mini-plug cable ..............................17 Stereo pin cable ........................................17 STP network cable ....................................27 STRAIGHT (Sound mode) .........................39 Straight decode ........................................39 Subnet Mask (Setup menu, IP Address) ...77 Subwoofer (Setup menu, Speaker) ...........69 Subwoofer connection ..............................16 Subwoofer Phase (Setup menu, Speaker) .........................70 Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) .................64 SUR.DEC (Sound mode) ...........................40 SUR.DECODE (Sound mode) ...................40 Surround (Setup menu, Speaker) .............70 Surround Back (Setup menu, Speaker) ... 70 Surround decoder .................................... 40 SW.Trim (Option menu) ............................ 64 System ID (Setup menu, Network) ........... 79 T Test Tone (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 71 The Bottom Line (Sound program) ........... 38 The Roxy Theatre (Sound program) ......... 38 Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 63 TONE CONTROL key ............................... 63 TP (Traffic Program) ................................. 45 Traffic information .................................... 45 Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 45 Treble (Option menu) ............................... 63 Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 42 TV Audio Input (Setup menu, HDMI) ........ 72 TV connection .......................................... 18 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP) .......... 81 TV operation keys .................................... 10 TV operations (Remote control) ............... 82 TV with HDMI input jacks (Connection) ... 21 TV without HDMI input jacks (Connection) ........................................ 22 U UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP) ................ 81 Update of the unit’s firmware ................... 85 Updating the firmware .............................. 81 USB (Input) ........................................ 47, 50 USB jack .................................................... 7 USB mass storage class .......................... 50 USB storage device ................................. 50 V V IN (Signal information) .......................... 64 V OUT (Signal information) ....................... 64 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP) ............... 81 VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 26 VIDEO jack ............................................... 17 Video Out (Option menu) ......................... 65 Video pin cable ........................................ 17 Video signal flow ...................................... 96 Video signal type ...................................... 81 Video/audio input jack combination ......... 24 Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 39 Virtual Presence Speaker ........................... 6 Volume (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 75 Volume Interlock (Option menu) .............. 65 Volume Trim (Option menu) ..................... 64 VPS ............................................................. 6 vTuner ID (Network information) .............. 79 W Warning message (YPAO) ....................... 33 Windows Media Player ............................. 53 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer .............................................. 30 YPAO ........................................................ 30 YPAO MIC jack ......................................... 30 YPAO microphone .................................... 30 Z ZB.Trim (Option menu) ............................. 61 ZONE A key .............................................. 61 Zone B ...................................................... 60 ZONE B key .............................................. 61 Zone B operation ...................................... 61 Zone B preparation .................................. 60 Zone B speaker connections ................... 60 Zone B volume adjustment ...................... 61 ZoneB (Setup menu) ................................ 69 ZoneB Trim (Option menu) ....................... 61 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 107 © 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE162B0/EN